blob: 69c38447027988d5f7039efd5776e0ca580b08a9 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 33
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288/**
289 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000290 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000291CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000292
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000293/**
294 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
295 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000296CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000297
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000298/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000299 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
300 * across an indexing session.
301 */
302typedef struct {
303 unsigned long long data[3];
304} CXFileUniqueID;
305
306/**
307 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
308 *
309 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
310 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
311 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
312 * otherwise returns 0.
313*/
314CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
315
316/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000317 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
318 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000319 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000320 */
321CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
322clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
323
324/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000325 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
326 *
327 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000328 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000329 * \param file_name the name of the file.
330 *
331 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
332 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
333 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000334CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000335 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000336
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000337/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000338 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
339 * or they are both NULL.
340 */
341CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
342
343/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000344 * @}
345 */
346
347/**
348 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
349 *
350 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
351 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
352 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
353 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
354 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
355 * specific location information from those data types.
356 *
357 * @{
358 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000359
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000360/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000361 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
362 * unit.
363 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000364 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000365 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000366 */
367typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000368 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000369 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000370} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000371
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000372/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000373 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000374 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000375 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
376 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000377 */
378typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000379 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000380 unsigned begin_int_data;
381 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000382} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000383
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000384/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000385 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
386 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000388
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000389/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000390 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000391 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000392 * code.
393 *
394 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
395 * if they refer to different locations.
396 */
397CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
398 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000399
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000400/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000401 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
402 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000403 */
404CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
405 CXFile file,
406 unsigned line,
407 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000408/**
409 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
410 * in a particular translation unit.
411 */
412CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
413 CXFile file,
414 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000415
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000416/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000417 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
418 */
419CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
420
421/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000422 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
423 * the corresponding translation unit.
424 */
425CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
426
427/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000428 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
429 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000430CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000431
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000432/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000433 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
434 * locations.
435 */
436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
437 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000438
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000439/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000440 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
441 *
442 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
443 */
444CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
445 CXSourceRange range2);
446
447/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000448 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000449 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000450CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000451
452/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000453 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
454 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000455 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000456 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
457 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000458 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000459 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
460 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000461 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000462 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000463 * source location points.
464 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000465 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000466 * source location points.
467 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000468 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
469 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000470 *
471 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
472 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000473 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000474CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
475 CXFile *file,
476 unsigned *line,
477 unsigned *column,
478 unsigned *offset);
479
480/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000481 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
482 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
483 *
484 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
485 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000486 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000487 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
488 *
489 * static int func(void)
490 * {
491 * return 0;
492 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000493 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000494 *
495 * the location information returned by this function would be
496 *
497 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
498 *
499 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
500 *
501 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
502 *
503 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
504 * into its parts.
505 *
506 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
507 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
508 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
509 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
510 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
511 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
512 * source location, an empty string is returned.
513 *
514 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
515 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
516 *
517 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
518 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
519 */
520CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
521 CXString *filename,
522 unsigned *line,
523 unsigned *column);
524
525/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000526 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
527 * by the given source location.
528 *
529 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000530 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000531 * details.
532 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
534 CXFile *file,
535 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000536 unsigned *column,
537 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000538
539/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000540 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
541 * the given source location.
542 *
543 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
544 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
545 *
546 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
547 * into its parts.
548 *
549 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
550 * source location points.
551 *
552 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
553 * source location points.
554 *
555 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
556 * source location points.
557 *
558 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
559 * buffer to which the given source location points.
560 */
561CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
562 CXFile *file,
563 unsigned *line,
564 unsigned *column,
565 unsigned *offset);
566
567/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000568 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
569 * the given source location.
570 *
571 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
572 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
573 * a macro argument.
574 *
575 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
576 * into its parts.
577 *
578 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
579 * source location points.
580 *
581 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
582 * source location points.
583 *
584 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
585 * source location points.
586 *
587 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
588 * buffer to which the given source location points.
589 */
590CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
591 CXFile *file,
592 unsigned *line,
593 unsigned *column,
594 unsigned *offset);
595
596/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000597 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
598 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000599 */
600CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
601
602/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000603 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
604 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000605 */
606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
607
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000608/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000609 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000610 */
611typedef struct {
612 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
613 unsigned count;
614 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000615 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000616 */
617 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000618} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000619
620/**
621 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000622 *
623 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
624 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000625 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000626CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
627 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000628
629/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000630 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000631 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000632CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000633
634/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000635 * @}
636 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000637
638/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000639 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
640 *
641 * @{
642 */
643
644/**
645 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
646 */
647enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
648 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000649 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000650 * option.
651 */
652 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000653
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000654 /**
655 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
656 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
657 */
658 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
659
660 /**
661 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
662 * wrong.
663 */
664 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
665
666 /**
667 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
668 */
669 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
670
671 /**
672 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
673 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
674 * results.
675 */
676 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
677};
678
679/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000680 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
681 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
682 */
683typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
684
685/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000686 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
687 */
688typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
689
690/**
691 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
692 */
693CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
694
695/**
696 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
697 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000698 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000699 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
700 *
701 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
702 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
703 */
704CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
705 unsigned Index);
706
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000707/**
708 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
709 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
710 */
711enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
712 /**
713 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
714 */
715 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
716
717 /**
718 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
719 * deserialize diagnostics.
720 */
721 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
722
723 /**
724 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
725 * could not be opened.
726 */
727 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
728
729 /**
730 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000731 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000732 */
733 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
734};
735
736/**
737 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000738 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000739 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
741 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000742 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000743 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
745 *
746 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000747 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000748 */
749CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
750 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
751 CXString *errorString);
752
753/**
754 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
755 */
756CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
757
758/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000759 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
760 *
761 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000762 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000763 */
764CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
765
766/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000767 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
768 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000769 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000770CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
771
772/**
773 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
774 *
775 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
776 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
777 *
778 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
779 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
780 */
781CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
782 unsigned Index);
783
784/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000785 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
786 * translation unit.
787 *
788 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
789 */
790CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
791 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
792
793/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000794 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
795 */
796CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000797
798/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000799 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
800 *
801 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000802 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000803 */
804enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
805 /**
806 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
807 * diagnostic was located.
808 *
809 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
810 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
811 *
812 * \code
813 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
814 * \endcode
815 *
816 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
817 */
818 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
819
820 /**
821 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
822 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
823 *
824 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
825 */
826 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
827
828 /**
829 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
830 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
831 * machine-parsable format.
832 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000833 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000834 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
835 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000836 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
837
838 /**
839 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
840 *
841 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
842 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
843 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
844 */
845 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
846
847 /**
848 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
849 *
850 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
851 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
852 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
853 */
854 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
855
856 /**
857 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
858 *
859 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
860 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
861 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
862 */
863 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000864};
865
866/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000867 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000868 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000870 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
871 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000872 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
873 *
874 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
875 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000876 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000877 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000878 *
879 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000880 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000881CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
882 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000883
884/**
885 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
886 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
887 *
888 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000889 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000890 */
891CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
892
893/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000894 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
895 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000896CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000897clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
898
899/**
900 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
901 *
902 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
903 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
904 */
905CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
906
907/**
908 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
909 */
910CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000911
912/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000913 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
914 * diagnostic.
915 *
916 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
917 *
918 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
919 * diagnostic (if any).
920 *
921 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
922 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
923 */
924CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
925 CXString *Disable);
926
927/**
928 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
929 *
930 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
931 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
932 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
933 *
934 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
935 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
936 */
937CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
938
939/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000940 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
941 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
942 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000943 *
944 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
945 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
946 *
947 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
948 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000949CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
950CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
951
952/**
953 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
954 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000955 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
956 */
957CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000958
959/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000960 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
961 * diagnostic.
962 */
963CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000964
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000965/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000966 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000970 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000972 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000974 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000976 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000978CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000979 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000980
981/**
982 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
983 * given diagnostic.
984 */
985CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
986
987/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000988 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000989 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
991 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
992 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
993 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
994 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
995 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
996 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
997 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
998 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000999 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001000 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1001 *
1002 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1003 *
1004 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1005 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1006 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1007 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1008 *
1009 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1010 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001011 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001012CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001013 unsigned FixIt,
1014 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001015
1016/**
1017 * @}
1018 */
1019
1020/**
1021 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1022 *
1023 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1024 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1025 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1026 *
1027 * @{
1028 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001029
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001030/**
1031 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1032 */
1033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1034clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1035
1036/**
1037 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1038 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1039 *
1040 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1041 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1042 * specified command line arguments.
1043 *
1044 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1045 * are ignored:
1046 *
1047 * '-c'
1048 * '-emit-ast'
1049 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001050 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001051 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001052 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1053 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001054 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001055 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001056 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1057 *
1058 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1059 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1060 *
1061 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1062 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1063 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1064 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001065 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001066 *
1067 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1068 * unsaved_files.
1069 *
1070 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1071 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001072 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1073 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1074 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001075 */
1076CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1077 CXIndex CIdx,
1078 const char *source_filename,
1079 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001080 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001081 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001082 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001083
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001084/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001085 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1086 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1087 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1088 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001089 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001090CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1091 CXIndex CIdx,
1092 const char *ast_filename);
1093
1094/**
1095 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1096 *
1097 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1098 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1099 *
1100 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1101 */
1102CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1103 CXIndex CIdx,
1104 const char *ast_filename,
1105 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001106
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001107/**
1108 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1109 *
1110 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1111 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1112 * constructing the translation unit.
1113 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001114enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1115 /**
1116 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1117 * needed.
1118 */
1119 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1120
1121 /**
1122 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1123 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1124 *
1125 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1126 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1127 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1128 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1129 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1130 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001131 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1132
1133 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001134 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001135 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1137 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1138 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1139 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1140 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1141 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1142 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001143 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001144 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145
1146 /**
1147 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1148 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1149 *
1150 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1151 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1152 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1153 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1154 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1155 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1156 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1157 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1158 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1159 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001160 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1161
1162 /**
1163 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1164 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1165 *
1166 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1167 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1168 * code-completion operations.
1169 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001170 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001171
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1174 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001175 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001176 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1177 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001178 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001179 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180
1181 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001182 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001183 *
1184 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001185 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001186 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001187 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1188
1189 /**
1190 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1191 * parsing.
1192 *
1193 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1194 * ignoring the usages.
1195 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001196 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1197
1198 /**
1199 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1200 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1201 * unit.
1202 */
Benjamin Kramer5c248d82015-12-15 09:30:31 +00001203 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
1204
1205 /**
1206 * \brief Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
1207 * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
1208 * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
1209 * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
1210 */
1211 CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001212};
1213
1214/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001215 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1216 * unit that is being edited.
1217 *
1218 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1219 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1220 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1221 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1222 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1223 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1224 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1225 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001226CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001227
1228/**
1229 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1230 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1231 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1232 * error codes.
1233 */
1234CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1235clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1236 const char *source_filename,
1237 const char *const *command_line_args,
1238 int num_command_line_args,
1239 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1240 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1241 unsigned options);
1242
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001243/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001244 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1245 * to that file.
1246 *
1247 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1248 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1249 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1250 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1251 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1252 *
1253 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1254 * associated.
1255 *
1256 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001257 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001258 *
1259 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1260 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1261 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1262 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001263 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001264 *
1265 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001266 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001267 *
1268 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001269 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001270 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1271 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1272 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1273 *
1274 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1275 * unsaved_files.
1276 *
1277 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1278 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1279 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1280 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001281 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1282 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1283 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1284 *
1285 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001286 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001287CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1288clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1289 const char *source_filename,
1290 const char *const *command_line_args,
1291 int num_command_line_args,
1292 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1293 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1294 unsigned options,
1295 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1296
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001297/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001298 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1299 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1300 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1301 */
1302CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1303 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1304 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1305 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1306 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1307
1308/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001309 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1310 *
1311 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1312 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1313 * saving the translation unit.
1314 */
1315enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1316 /**
1317 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1318 */
1319 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1320};
1321
1322/**
1323 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1324 * unit.
1325 *
1326 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1327 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1328 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1329 * the most commonly-requested data.
1330 */
1331CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1332
1333/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001334 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1335 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1336 */
1337enum CXSaveError {
1338 /**
1339 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1340 */
1341 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1342
1343 /**
1344 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1345 * the file.
1346 *
1347 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1348 * write the file.
1349 */
1350 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1351
1352 /**
1353 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1354 * to save the translation unit.
1355 *
1356 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1357 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1358 */
1359 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1360
1361 /**
1362 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1363 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1364 */
1365 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1366};
1367
1368/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001369 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1370 * that translation unit on disk.
1371 *
1372 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1373 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1374 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1375 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1376 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1377 * units.
1378 *
1379 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001380 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001381 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1382 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001383 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1384 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1385 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1386 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001387 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1388 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1389 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001390 */
1391CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001392 const char *FileName,
1393 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001394
1395/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001396 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1397 */
1398CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001399
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001400/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001401 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1402 *
1403 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1404 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1405 * reparsing the translation unit.
1406 */
1407enum CXReparse_Flags {
1408 /**
1409 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1410 */
1411 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1412};
1413
1414/**
1415 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1416 * unit.
1417 *
1418 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1419 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1420 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1421 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1422 * to the next.
1423 */
1424CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1425
1426/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001427 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1428 *
1429 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1430 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1431 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1432 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1433 * was originally parsed.
1434 *
1435 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1436 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1437 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1438 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1439 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1440 * unit using this routine.
1441 *
1442 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1443 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1444 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1445 *
1446 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1447 * unsaved_files.
1448 *
1449 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1450 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1451 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1452 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1453 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1454 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001455 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1456 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1457 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1458 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001459 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001460 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001461 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1462 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1463 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001464 */
1465CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1466 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001467 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1468 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001469
1470/**
1471 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1472 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001473enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1474 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1475 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1476 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1477 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001478 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001479 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001480 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001481 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1482 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1483 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001484 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1485 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001486 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001487 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001488 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1489 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001490 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001491
1492 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001493 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001494};
1495
1496/**
1497 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001498 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001499 */
1500CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001501const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001502
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001503typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001504 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001505 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1506 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1507 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001508 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001509} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001510
1511/**
1512 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1513 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001514typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001515 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1516 void *data;
1517
1518 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1519 unsigned numEntries;
1520
1521 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1522 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001523 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001524
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001526
1527/**
1528 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001529 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001530 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001531CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001532
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001534
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001535/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001536 * @}
1537 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001538
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001539/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001540 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1541 */
1542enum CXCursorKind {
1543 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001544 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001545 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001546 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001547 *
1548 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1549 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1550 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1551 * of the declaration is not reported.
1552 */
1553 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1554 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001555 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001556 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1557 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1558 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1559 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1560 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1561 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001562 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001563 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1564 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1565 */
1566 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1567 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1568 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1569 /** \brief A function. */
1570 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1571 /** \brief A variable. */
1572 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1573 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1574 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001575 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001576 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001577 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001578 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001579 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001580 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001581 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001582 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1583 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1584 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1585 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1586 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1587 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1588 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001589 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001590 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001591 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001592 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001593 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001594 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001595 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1596 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001597 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1598 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001599 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1600 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001601 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1602 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1603 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1604 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1605 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1606 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001607 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1608 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1609 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1610 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1611 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1612 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1613 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1614 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001615 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1616 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001617 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1618 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001619 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1620 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001621 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1622 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001623 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001624 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001625 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1626 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001627 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001628 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001629 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001630 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001631 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1632 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001633
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001634 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001635 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001636
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001637 /* References */
1638 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001639 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001640 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1641 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1642 /**
1643 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1644 *
1645 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1646 * declared. For example, given:
1647 *
1648 * \code
1649 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1650 * size_type size;
1651 * \endcode
1652 *
1653 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1654 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1655 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1656 */
1657 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001658 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001659 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001660 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1661 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001662 */
1663 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001664 /**
1665 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1666 */
1667 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001668 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001669 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1670 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001671 */
1672 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001673 /**
1674 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1675 *
1676 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1677 * goto statement in the following example:
1678 *
1679 * \code
1680 * start_over:
1681 * ++counter;
1682 *
1683 * goto start_over;
1684 * \endcode
1685 *
1686 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1687 */
1688 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1689
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001690 /**
1691 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1692 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1693 *
1694 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1695 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1696 *
1697 * \code
1698 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1699 *
1700 * struct X { ... };
1701 * void swap(X&, X&);
1702 *
1703 * template<typename T>
1704 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1705 * while (first < last - 1) {
1706 * swap(*first, *--last);
1707 * ++first;
1708 * }
1709 * }
1710 *
1711 * struct Y { };
1712 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1713 * \endcode
1714 *
1715 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1716 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1717 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1718 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1719 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1720 * example).
1721 *
1722 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1723 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1724 * referenced by this cursor.
1725 */
1726 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1727
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001728 /**
1729 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1730 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1731 */
1732 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1733
1734 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001735
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001736 /* Error conditions */
1737 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1738 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1739 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1740 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001741 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1742 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001743
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001744 /* Expressions */
1745 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001746
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001747 /**
1748 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001749 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001750 *
1751 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1752 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1753 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1754 * expression is not reported.
1755 */
1756 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001757
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001758 /**
1759 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001760 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001761 */
1762 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001763
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001764 /**
1765 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1766 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1767 */
1768 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001769
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001770 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1771 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001772
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001773 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1774 object or class. */
1775 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001776
1777 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1778 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1779
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001780 /** \brief An integer literal.
1781 */
1782 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1783
1784 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1785 */
1786 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1787
1788 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1789 */
1790 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1791
1792 /** \brief A string literal.
1793 */
1794 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1795
1796 /** \brief A character literal.
1797 */
1798 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1799
1800 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1801 *
1802 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1803 */
1804 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1805
1806 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1807 * alignof).
1808 */
1809 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1810
1811 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1812 */
1813 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1814
1815 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1816 * "x <= y".
1817 */
1818 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1819
1820 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1821 */
1822 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1823
1824 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1825 */
1826 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1827
1828 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1829 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1830 *
1831 * For example: (int)f.
1832 */
1833 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1834
1835 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1836 */
1837 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1838
1839 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1840 */
1841 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1842
1843 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1844 */
1845 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1846
1847 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1848 */
1849 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1850
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001851 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001852 */
1853 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1854
1855 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1856 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1857 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1858 *
1859 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1860 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1861 * match the size of a pointer).
1862 */
1863 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1864
1865 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1866 */
1867 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1868
1869 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1870 */
1871 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1872
1873 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1874 */
1875 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1876
1877 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1878 */
1879 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1880
1881 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1882 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1883 *
1884 * Example:
1885 * \code
1886 * x = int(0.5);
1887 * \endcode
1888 */
1889 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1890
1891 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1892 */
1893 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1894
1895 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1896 */
1897 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1898
1899 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1900 */
1901 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1902
1903 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1904 */
1905 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1906
1907 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1908 *
1909 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1910 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1911 */
1912 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1913
1914 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1915 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1916 */
1917 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1918
1919 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1920 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1921 */
1922 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1923
1924 /** \brief A unary expression.
1925 */
1926 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1927
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001928 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001929 */
1930 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1931
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001932 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001933 */
1934 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1935
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001936 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001937 */
1938 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1939
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001940 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001941 */
1942 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1943
1944 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1945 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1946 *
1947 * \code
1948 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1949 * \endcode
1950 */
1951 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1952
1953 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1954 * expressions.
1955 *
1956 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1957 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1958 *
1959 * \code
1960 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1961 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1962 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1963 * }
1964 * \endcode
1965 */
1966 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1967
1968 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1969 * pack.
1970 *
1971 * \code
1972 * template<typename ...Types>
1973 * struct count {
1974 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1975 * };
1976 * \endcode
1977 */
1978 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1979
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001980 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1981 * object.
1982 *
1983 * \code
1984 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1985 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1986 * [](float a, float b) {
1987 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1988 * });
1989 * }
1990 * \endcode
1991 */
1992 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
1993
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00001994 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
1995 */
1996 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
1997
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001998 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00001999 */
2000 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
2001
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00002002 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
2003 */
2004 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
2005
2006 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002007
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002008 /* Statements */
2009 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2010 /**
2011 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2012 * interface.
2013 *
2014 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2015 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2016 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2017 * reported.
2018 */
2019 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002020
2021 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2022 *
2023 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2024 * the following example:
2025 *
2026 * \code
2027 * start_over:
2028 * ++counter;
2029 * \endcode
2030 *
2031 */
2032 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002033
2034 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2035 *
2036 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2037 * bodies.
2038 */
2039 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2040
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002041 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002042 */
2043 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2044
2045 /** \brief A default statement.
2046 */
2047 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2048
2049 /** \brief An if statement
2050 */
2051 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2052
2053 /** \brief A switch statement.
2054 */
2055 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2056
2057 /** \brief A while statement.
2058 */
2059 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2060
2061 /** \brief A do statement.
2062 */
2063 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2064
2065 /** \brief A for statement.
2066 */
2067 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2068
2069 /** \brief A goto statement.
2070 */
2071 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2072
2073 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2074 */
2075 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2076
2077 /** \brief A continue statement.
2078 */
2079 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2080
2081 /** \brief A break statement.
2082 */
2083 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2084
2085 /** \brief A return statement.
2086 */
2087 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2088
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002089 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002090 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002091 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002092 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002093
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002094 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002095 */
2096 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2097
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002098 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002099 */
2100 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2101
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002102 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002103 */
2104 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2105
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002106 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002107 */
2108 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2109
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002110 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002111 */
2112 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2113
2114 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2115 */
2116 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2117
2118 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2119 */
2120 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2121
2122 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2123 */
2124 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2125
2126 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2127 */
2128 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2129
2130 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2131 */
2132 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2133
2134 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2135 */
2136 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2137
2138 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2139 */
2140 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2141
2142 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2143 */
2144 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2145
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002146 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2147 */
2148 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2149
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002150 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002151 *
2152 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2153 */
2154 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2155
2156 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2157 * expressions.
2158 */
2159 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2160
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002161 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2162 */
2163 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2164
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002165 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002166 */
2167 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2168
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002169 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2170 */
2171 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2172
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002173 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2174 */
2175 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2176
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002177 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2178 */
2179 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2180
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002181 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2182 */
2183 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2184
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002185 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2186 */
2187 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2188
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002189 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2190 */
2191 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2192
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002193 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2194 */
2195 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2196
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002197 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2198 */
2199 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2200
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002201 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2202 */
2203 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2204
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002205 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2206 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002207 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002208
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002209 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2210 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002211 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002212
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002213 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2214 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002215 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002216
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002217 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2218 */
2219 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002220
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002221 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2222 */
2223 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2224
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002225 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2226 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002227 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002228
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002229 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2230 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002231 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002232
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002233 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002234 */
2235 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2236
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002237 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002238 */
2239 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2240
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002241 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2242 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002243 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002244
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002245 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2246 */
2247 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2248
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002249 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002250 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002251 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002252
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002253 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2254 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002255 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002256
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002257 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2258 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002259 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002260
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002261 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2262 */
2263 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2264
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002265 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2266 */
2267 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2268
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002269 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2270 */
2271 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2272
Carlo Bertolli6200a3d2015-12-14 14:51:25 +00002273 /** \brief OpenMP distribute directive.
2274 */
2275 CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
2276
2277 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002278
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002279 /**
2280 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2281 *
2282 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2283 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2284 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002285 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2286
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002287 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002288 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2289 /**
2290 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2291 * interface.
2292 */
2293 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2294
2295 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2296 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002297 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002298 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2299 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002300 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002301 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002302 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002303 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2304 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2305 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002306 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2307 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2308 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2309 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002310 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002311 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
Saleem Abdulrasool8aa0b802015-12-10 18:45:18 +00002312 CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
2313 CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
2314 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_DLLImport,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002315
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002316 /* Preprocessing */
2317 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002318 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002319 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2320 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002321 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002322 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002323 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2324
2325 /* Extra Declarations */
2326 /**
2327 * \brief A module import declaration.
2328 */
2329 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002330 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002331 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002332 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002333
2334 /**
2335 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2336 */
2337 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002338};
2339
2340/**
2341 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2342 * a translation unit.
2343 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002344 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002345 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2346 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2347 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2348 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2349 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2350 *
2351 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2352 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2353 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2354 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2355 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2356 * source code into the AST.
2357 */
2358typedef struct {
2359 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002360 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002361 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002362} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002363
2364/**
2365 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2366 *
2367 * @{
2368 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002369
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002370/**
2371 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2372 */
2373CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002374
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002375/**
2376 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2377 *
2378 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2379 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2380 */
2381CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2382
2383/**
2384 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2385 */
2386CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002387
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002388/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002389 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002390 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002391CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002392
2393/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002394 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2395 */
2396CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2397
2398/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002399 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2400 */
2401CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2402
2403/**
2404 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2405 */
2406CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2407
2408/**
2409 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2410 * reference.
2411 *
2412 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2413 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2414 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2415 */
2416CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2417
2418/**
2419 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2420 */
2421CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2422
2423/**
2424 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2425 */
2426CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2427
2428/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002429 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2430 */
2431CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2432
2433/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00002434 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
2435 */
2436CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
2437
2438/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002439 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002440 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002441 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002442CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2443
2444/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002445 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2446 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002447 */
2448CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002449
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002450/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002451 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2452 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2453 */
2454CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2455
2456/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002457 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2458 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2459 */
2460CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2461
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002462/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002463 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2464 */
2465enum CXLinkageKind {
2466 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2467 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2468 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2469 /**
2470 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2471 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2472 */
2473 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2474 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2475 CXLinkage_Internal,
2476 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2477 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2478 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2479 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2480 CXLinkage_External
2481};
2482
2483/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002484 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002485 */
2486CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2487
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002488enum CXVisibilityKind {
2489 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2490 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2491 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2492
2493 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2494 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2495 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2496 CXVisibility_Protected,
2497 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
Chad Rosierc6bb4242015-11-23 21:05:04 +00002498 CXVisibility_Default
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002499};
2500
NAKAMURA Takumia70cdf52015-11-23 22:51:26 +00002501/**
2502 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2503 *
2504 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2505 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2506 * commandline arguments.
2507 *
2508 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2509 *
2510 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2511 */
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002512CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2513
2514/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002515 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2516 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002517 *
2518 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2519 *
2520 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2521 */
2522CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2523clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2524
2525/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002526 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2527 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2528 */
2529typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2530 /**
2531 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2532 * provides availability information.
2533 *
2534 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2535 */
2536 CXString Platform;
2537 /**
2538 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2539 */
2540 CXVersion Introduced;
2541 /**
2542 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2543 * still available).
2544 */
2545 CXVersion Deprecated;
2546 /**
2547 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2548 * is no longer available.
2549 */
2550 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2551 /**
2552 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2553 */
2554 int Unavailable;
2555 /**
2556 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2557 * suggest replacement APIs.
2558 */
2559 CXString Message;
2560} CXPlatformAvailability;
2561
2562/**
2563 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2564 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2565 *
2566 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2567 *
2568 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2569 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2570 *
2571 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2572 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2573 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2574 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002575 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002576 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2577 *
2578 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2579 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2580 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2581 *
2582 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2583 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2584 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2585 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2586 *
2587 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2588 * \c availability array.
2589 *
2590 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2591 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2592 *
2593 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2594 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2595 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2596 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2597 */
2598CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2599clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2600 int *always_deprecated,
2601 CXString *deprecated_message,
2602 int *always_unavailable,
2603 CXString *unavailable_message,
2604 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2605 int availability_size);
2606
2607/**
2608 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2609 */
2610CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2611clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2612
2613/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002614 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2615 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002616enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002617 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002618 CXLanguage_C,
2619 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002620 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002621};
2622
2623/**
2624 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2625 */
2626CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2627
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002628/**
2629 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2630 */
2631CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2632
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002633/**
2634 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2635 */
2636typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2637
2638/**
2639 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2640 */
2641CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2642
2643/**
2644 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2645 */
2646CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2647
2648/**
2649 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2650 *
2651 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2652*/
2653CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2654 CXCursor cursor);
2655
2656/**
2657 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2658 *
2659 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2660*/
2661CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2662 CXCursor cursor);
2663
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002664/**
2665 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2666 *
2667 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2668 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2669 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2670 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2671 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2672 *
2673 * \code
2674 * class C {
2675 * void f();
2676 * };
2677 *
2678 * void C::f() { }
2679 * \endcode
2680 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002681 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002682 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2683 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002684 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002685 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2686 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2687 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2688 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2689 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2690 *
2691 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2692 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2693 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002694 *
2695 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002696 */
2697CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2698
2699/**
2700 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2701 *
2702 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2703 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2704 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2705 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2706 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2707 *
2708 * \code
2709 * class C {
2710 * void f();
2711 * };
2712 *
2713 * void C::f() { }
2714 * \endcode
2715 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002716 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002717 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2718 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002719 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002720 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2721 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2722 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2723 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2724 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2725 *
2726 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2727 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2728 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002729 *
2730 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2731 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002732 */
2733CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002734
2735/**
2736 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2737 * method.
2738 *
2739 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2740 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2741 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002742 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2743 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2744 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2745 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2746 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2747 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002748 *
2749 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2750 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2751 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2752 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2753 * base classes.
2754 *
2755 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2756 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2757 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2758 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2759 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2760 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2761 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2762 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2763 *
2764 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2765 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2766 * method overrides.
2767 *
2768 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2769 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2770 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2771 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2772 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2773 *
2774 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2775 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2776 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2777 */
2778CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2779 CXCursor **overridden,
2780 unsigned *num_overridden);
2781
2782/**
2783 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2784 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2785 */
2786CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2787
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002788/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002789 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2790 * cursor.
2791 */
2792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2793
2794/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002795 * @}
2796 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002797
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002798/**
2799 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2800 *
2801 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2802 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2803 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2804 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2805 *
2806 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002807 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002808
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002809/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002810 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2811 * location in the source code.
2812 *
2813 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2814 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002815 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002816 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002817 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002818 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2819 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2820 *
2821 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2822 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002823 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002824CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002825
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002826/**
2827 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2828 * by the given cursor.
2829 *
2830 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002831 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2832 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2833 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002834 * source code.
2835 */
2836CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002837
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002838/**
2839 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002840 * the given cursor.
2841 *
2842 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2843 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002844 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002845 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2846 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2847 * entity was actually used).
2848 */
2849CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002850
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002851/**
2852 * @}
2853 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002854
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002855/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002856 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2857 *
2858 * @{
2859 */
2860
2861/**
2862 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2863 */
2864enum CXTypeKind {
2865 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002866 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002867 */
2868 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2869
2870 /**
2871 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2872 * interface.
2873 */
2874 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2875
2876 /* Builtin types */
2877 CXType_Void = 2,
2878 CXType_Bool = 3,
2879 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2880 CXType_UChar = 5,
2881 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2882 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2883 CXType_UShort = 8,
2884 CXType_UInt = 9,
2885 CXType_ULong = 10,
2886 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2887 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2888 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2889 CXType_SChar = 14,
2890 CXType_WChar = 15,
2891 CXType_Short = 16,
2892 CXType_Int = 17,
2893 CXType_Long = 18,
2894 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2895 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2896 CXType_Float = 21,
2897 CXType_Double = 22,
2898 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2899 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2900 CXType_Overload = 25,
2901 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2902 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2903 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2904 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
2905 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2906 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2907
2908 CXType_Complex = 100,
2909 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2910 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2911 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2912 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2913 CXType_Record = 105,
2914 CXType_Enum = 106,
2915 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2916 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002917 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2918 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002919 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002920 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002921 CXType_Vector = 113,
2922 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2923 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002924 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002925 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
2926 CXType_Auto = 118
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002927};
2928
2929/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002930 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2931 */
2932enum CXCallingConv {
2933 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2934 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2935 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2936 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2937 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2938 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2939 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2940 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00002941 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002942 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002943 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2944 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00002945 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002946
2947 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2948 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2949};
2950
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002951/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002952 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2953 *
2954 */
2955typedef struct {
2956 enum CXTypeKind kind;
2957 void *data[2];
2958} CXType;
2959
2960/**
2961 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
2962 */
2963CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
2964
2965/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00002966 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
2967 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
2968 *
2969 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
2970 */
2971CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
2972
2973/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002974 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
2975 *
2976 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
2977 * returned.
2978 */
2979CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
2980
2981/**
2982 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
2983 *
2984 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
2985 * returned.
2986 */
2987CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
2988
2989/**
2990 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
2991 * long long.
2992 *
2993 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
2994 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2995 * must be verified before calling this function.
2996 */
2997CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
2998
2999/**
3000 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
3001 * long long.
3002 *
3003 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
3004 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3005 * must be verified before calling this function.
3006 */
3007CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
3008
3009/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00003010 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
3011 *
3012 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
3013 */
3014CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3015
3016/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003017 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3018 * cursor.
3019 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003020 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3021 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003022 */
3023CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3024
3025/**
3026 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3027 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003028 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3029 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3030 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003031 */
3032CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3033
3034/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003035 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3036 *
3037 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3038 * element descriptions.
3039 */
3040enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3041 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3042 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3043 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3044 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3045 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3046 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3047 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3048 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3049 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3050 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3051 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3052};
3053
3054/**
3055 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3056 * template specialization.
3057 *
3058 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3059 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3060 *
3061 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3062 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3063 * void foo() { ... }
3064 *
3065 * template <>
3066 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3067 *
3068 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3069 */
3070CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3071
3072/**
3073 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3074 *
3075 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3076 * template argument kind is returned.
3077 *
3078 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3079 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3080 * void foo() { ... }
3081 *
3082 * template <>
3083 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3084 *
3085 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3086 * respectively.
3087 */
3088CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3089 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3090
3091/**
3092 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3093 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3094 *
3095 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3096 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3097 * is returned.
3098 *
3099 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3100 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3101 * void foo() { ... }
3102 *
3103 * template <>
3104 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3105 *
3106 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3107 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3108 */
3109CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3110 unsigned I);
3111
3112/**
3113 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3114 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3115 *
3116 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3117 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3118 *
3119 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3120 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3121 * void foo() { ... }
3122 *
3123 * template <>
3124 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3125 *
3126 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3127 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3128 */
3129CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3130 unsigned I);
3131
3132/**
3133 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3134 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3135 *
3136 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3137 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3138 *
3139 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3140 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3141 * void foo() { ... }
3142 *
3143 * template <>
3144 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3145 *
3146 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3147 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3148 */
3149CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3150 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3151
3152/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003153 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003154 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003155 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3156 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003157 */
3158CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3159
3160/**
3161 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3162 *
3163 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3164 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3165 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3166 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3167 */
3168CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3169
3170/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003171 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3172 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3173 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003174 */
3175CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3176
3177/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003178 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
3179 * function like.
3180 */
3181CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
3182
3183/**
3184 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
3185 * builtin one.
3186 */
3187CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
3188
3189/**
3190 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
3191 * inline declaration.
3192 */
3193CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
3194
3195/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003196 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3197 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3198 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003199 */
3200CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3201
3202/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003203 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3204 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3205 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003206 */
3207CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3208
3209/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003210 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003211 */
3212CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3213
3214/**
3215 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3216 */
3217CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3218
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003219/**
3220 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3221 */
3222CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003223
3224/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003225 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
3226 */
3227CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
3228
3229/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003230 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3231 */
3232CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3233
3234/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003235 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3236 *
3237 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3238 */
3239CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3240
3241/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003242 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003243 *
3244 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003245 */
3246CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3247
3248/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003249 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003250 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003251 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003252 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003253 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003254CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003255
3256/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003257 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003258 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003259 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3260 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003261 */
3262CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3263
3264/**
3265 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003266 */
3267CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3268
3269/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003270 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003271 *
3272 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003273 */
3274CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3275
3276/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003277 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3278 * otherwise.
3279 */
3280CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3281
3282/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003283 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3284 *
3285 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3286 * an invalid type is returned.
3287 */
3288CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3289
3290/**
3291 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3292 *
3293 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3294 * -1 is returned.
3295 */
3296CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3297
3298/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003299 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3300 *
3301 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3302 */
3303CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3304
3305/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003306 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003307 *
3308 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3309 */
3310CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3311
3312/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003313 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3314 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3315 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3316 *
3317 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3318 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3319 */
3320enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3321 /**
3322 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3323 */
3324 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3325 /**
3326 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3327 */
3328 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3329 /**
3330 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3331 */
3332 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3333 /**
3334 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3335 */
3336 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3337 /**
3338 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3339 */
3340 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3341};
3342
3343/**
3344 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3345 * standard.
3346 *
3347 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3348 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3349 * is returned.
3350 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3351 * returned.
3352 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3353 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3354 */
3355CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3356
3357/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003358 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3359 *
3360 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3361 */
3362CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3363
3364/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003365 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3366 *
3367 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3368 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3369 * is returned.
3370 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3371 * returned.
3372 */
3373CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3374
3375/**
3376 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3377 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3378 *
3379 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3380 * is returned.
3381 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3382 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3383 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3384 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3385 * If the field's name S is not found,
3386 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3387 */
3388CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3389
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003390/**
3391 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3392 *
3393 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3394 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3395 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3396 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3397 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3398 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3399 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3400 * If the field's name S is not found,
3401 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3402 */
3403CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3404
3405/**
3406 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3407 * declaration.
3408 */
3409CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3410
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003411enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3412 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3413 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3414 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3415 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3416 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3417 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3418};
3419
3420/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003421 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3422 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3423 *
3424 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3425 * further.
3426 */
3427CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3428
3429/**
3430 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3431 * at given index.
3432 *
3433 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3434 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3435 */
3436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3437
3438/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003439 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3440 *
3441 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3442 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3443 */
3444CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3445
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003446/**
3447 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3448 * bitfield.
3449 */
3450CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3451
3452/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003453 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3454 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3455 */
3456CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3457
3458/**
3459 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3460 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3461 */
3462enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3463 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3464 CX_CXXPublic,
3465 CX_CXXProtected,
3466 CX_CXXPrivate
3467};
3468
3469/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003470 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003471 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003472 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3473 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3474 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003475 */
3476CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3477
3478/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003479 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003480 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003481 */
3482enum CX_StorageClass {
3483 CX_SC_Invalid,
3484 CX_SC_None,
3485 CX_SC_Extern,
3486 CX_SC_Static,
3487 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3488 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3489 CX_SC_Auto,
3490 CX_SC_Register
3491};
3492
3493/**
3494 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3495 *
3496 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3497 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3498 */
3499CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3500
3501/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003502 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3503 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3504 *
3505 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3506 *
3507 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3508 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3509 */
3510CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3511
3512/**
3513 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3514 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3515 *
3516 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3517 *
3518 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3519 * the cursor.
3520 *
3521 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3522 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3523 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3524 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3525 */
3526CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3527 unsigned index);
3528
3529/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003530 * @}
3531 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003532
3533/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003534 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003535 *
3536 * @{
3537 */
3538
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003539/**
3540 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3541 * this function returns the collection element type.
3542 *
3543 */
3544CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3545
3546/**
3547 * @}
3548 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003549
3550/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003551 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3552 *
3553 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3554 * using cursors.
3555 *
3556 * @{
3557 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003558
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003559/**
3560 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3561 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3562 *
3563 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3564 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3565 */
3566enum CXChildVisitResult {
3567 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003568 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003569 */
3570 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003571 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003572 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3573 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3574 */
3575 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3576 /**
3577 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3578 * the same visitor and client data.
3579 */
3580 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3581};
3582
3583/**
3584 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3585 *
3586 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3587 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3588 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3589 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3590 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3591 *
3592 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3593 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3594 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003595typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3596 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003597 CXClientData client_data);
3598
3599/**
3600 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3601 *
3602 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3603 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3604 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3605 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3606 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3607 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003608 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003609 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003610 * definition, have no children).
3611 *
3612 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3613 * child of \p parent.
3614 *
3615 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3616 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3617 *
3618 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3619 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3620 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003621CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003622 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3623 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003624#ifdef __has_feature
3625# if __has_feature(blocks)
3626/**
3627 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3628 *
3629 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3630 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3631 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3632 *
3633 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3634 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3635 */
3636typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3637 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3638
3639/**
3640 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3641 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3642 */
3643unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3644 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
3645# endif
3646#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003647
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003648/**
3649 * @}
3650 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003651
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003652/**
3653 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3654 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003655 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003656 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3657 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3658 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3659 *
3660 * @{
3661 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003662
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003663/**
3664 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3665 * by the given cursor.
3666 *
3667 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3668 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3669 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3670 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3671 */
3672CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3673
3674/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003675 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3676 */
3677CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3678
3679/**
3680 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3681 */
3682CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003683 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003684 const char *category_name);
3685
3686/**
3687 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3688 */
3689CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3690 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3691
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003692/**
3693 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3694 * the USR for its containing class.
3695 */
3696CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3697 CXString classUSR);
3698
3699/**
3700 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3701 * the USR for its containing class.
3702 */
3703CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3704 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3705 CXString classUSR);
3706
3707/**
3708 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3709 * for its containing class.
3710 */
3711CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3712 CXString classUSR);
3713
3714/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003715 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3716 */
3717CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3718
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003719/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003720 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3721 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003722 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3723 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003724 *
3725 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3726 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3727 *
3728 * \param options Reserved.
3729 */
3730CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3731 unsigned pieceIndex,
3732 unsigned options);
3733
3734/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003735 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3736 *
3737 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3738 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3739 * class template specialization.
3740 */
3741CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3742
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003743/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3744 * entity that it references.
3745 *
3746 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3747 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003748 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003749 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3750 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003751 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003752 */
3753CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003754
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003755/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003756 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3757 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3758 * that entity.
3759 *
3760 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3761 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3762 * definition. For example, given:
3763 *
3764 * \code
3765 * int f(int, int);
3766 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3767 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3768 * int f(int, int);
3769 * \endcode
3770 *
3771 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3772 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3773 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3774 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3775 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3776 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3777 * declaration).
3778 *
3779 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3780 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3781 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3782 */
3783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3784
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003785/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003786 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3787 * is also a definition of that entity.
3788 */
3789CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3790
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003791/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003792 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3793 *
3794 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3795 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3796 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3797 *
3798 * \code
3799 * struct X;
3800 * struct X;
3801 * struct X {
3802 * int member;
3803 * };
3804 * \endcode
3805 *
3806 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3807 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3808 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3809 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3810 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3811 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3812 *
3813 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3814 */
3815CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3816
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003817/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003818 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3819 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003820 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003821 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003822 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3823 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003824 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003825 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3826 * otherwise.
3827 */
3828CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3829
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003830/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003831 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3832 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003833 *
3834 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003835 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3836 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003837 *
3838 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3839 * method/message, it will return zero.
3840 */
3841CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3842
3843/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003844 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3845 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003846 */
3847CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3848
3849/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003850 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3851 */
3852typedef enum {
3853 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3854 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3855 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3856 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3857 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3858 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3859 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3860 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3861 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3862 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3863 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3864 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
3865 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800
3866} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3867
3868/**
3869 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3870 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3871 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3872 *
3873 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3874 */
3875CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3876 unsigned reserved);
3877
3878/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003879 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003880 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003881 */
3882typedef enum {
3883 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3884 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3885 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3886 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3887 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3888 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3889 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3890} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3891
3892/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003893 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3894 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3895 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3896 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003897 */
3898CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3899
3900/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003901 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3902 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003903 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3904 */
3905CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3906
3907/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003908 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3909 */
3910CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3911
3912/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003913 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3914 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3915 * with whitespace in between.
3916 */
3917CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3918
3919/**
3920 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3921 * comment text, including comment markers.
3922 */
3923CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3924
3925/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003926 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3927 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3928 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003929 */
3930CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3931
3932/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003933 * @}
3934 */
3935
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003936/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
3937 *
3938 * @{
3939 */
3940
3941/**
3942 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
3943 */
3944CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
3945
3946/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00003947 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
3948 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
3949 */
3950CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
3951
3952/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003953 * @}
3954 */
3955
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003956/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003957 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
3958 *
3959 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
3960 *
3961 * @{
3962 */
3963
3964typedef void *CXModule;
3965
3966/**
3967 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
3968 */
3969CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
3970
3971/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00003972 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
3973 * exists.
3974 */
3975CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
3976
3977/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003978 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003979 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00003980 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
3981 */
3982CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
3983
3984/**
3985 * \param Module a module object.
3986 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003987 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
3988 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
3989 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003990CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003991
3992/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003993 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003994 *
3995 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
3996 * will return "vector".
3997 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003998CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003999
4000/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004001 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004002 *
4003 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
4004 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004005CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004006
4007/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004008 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004009 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00004010 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
4011 */
4012CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
4013
4014/**
4015 * \param Module a module object.
4016 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004017 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
4018 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004019CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
4020 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004021
4022/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004023 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004024 *
4025 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
4026 *
4027 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
4028 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004029CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004030CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
4031 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004032
4033/**
4034 * @}
4035 */
4036
4037/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004038 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4039 *
4040 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4041 * to C++ language features.
4042 *
4043 * @{
4044 */
4045
4046/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004047 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4048 */
4049CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4050
4051/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004052 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4053 * pure virtual.
4054 */
4055CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4056
4057/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004058 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4059 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004060 */
4061CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4062
4063/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004064 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4065 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4066 * one of the base classes.
4067 */
4068CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4069
4070/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004071 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4072 * declared 'const'.
4073 */
4074CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4075
4076/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004077 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4078 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4079 * the template.
4080 *
4081 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4082 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4083 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4084 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4085 *
4086 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4087 * declaration.
4088 *
4089 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4090 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4091 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4092 */
4093CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4094
4095/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004096 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4097 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4098 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4099 *
4100 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4101 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4102 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4103 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4104 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4105 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4106 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4107 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4108 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4109 *
4110 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4111 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4112 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4113 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4114 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4115 *
4116 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4117 * of a template.
4118 *
4119 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4120 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4121 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4122 */
4123CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004124
4125/**
4126 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4127 * covering that reference.
4128 *
4129 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4130 * an operator call.
4131 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4132 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4133 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4134 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4135 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4136 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004137 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004138 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4139 *
4140 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4141 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4142 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004143CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4144 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004145 unsigned PieceIndex);
4146
4147enum CXNameRefFlags {
4148 /**
4149 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4150 * range.
4151 */
4152 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4153
4154 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004155 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4156 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004157 */
4158 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4159
4160 /**
4161 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4162 *
4163 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4164 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4165 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004166 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004167 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4168 * \endcode
4169 */
4170 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4171};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004172
4173/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004174 * @}
4175 */
4176
4177/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004178 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4179 *
4180 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4181 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4182 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004183 *
4184 * @{
4185 */
4186
4187/**
4188 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4189 */
4190typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4191 /**
4192 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4193 */
4194 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004195
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004196 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004197 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004198 */
4199 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004200
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004201 /**
4202 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4203 */
4204 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004205
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004206 /**
4207 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4208 */
4209 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004210
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004211 /**
4212 * \brief A comment.
4213 */
4214 CXToken_Comment
4215} CXTokenKind;
4216
4217/**
4218 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4219 */
4220typedef struct {
4221 unsigned int_data[4];
4222 void *ptr_data;
4223} CXToken;
4224
4225/**
4226 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4227 */
4228CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004229
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004230/**
4231 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4232 *
4233 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4234 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4235 */
4236CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004237
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004238/**
4239 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4240 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004241CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004242 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004243
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004244/**
4245 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4246 */
4247CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4248
4249/**
4250 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4251 * lexical tokens.
4252 *
4253 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4254 *
4255 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4256 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4257 *
4258 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4259 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4260 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4261 *
4262 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4263 * array.
4264 *
4265 */
4266CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4267 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004268
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004269/**
4270 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4271 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4272 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004273 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4274 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4275 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4276 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4277 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4278 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4279 *
4280 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4281 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4282 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4283 *
4284 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4285 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4286 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4287 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4288 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004289 *
4290 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4291 *
4292 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4293 *
4294 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4295 *
4296 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4297 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4298 */
4299CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4300 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4301 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004302
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004303/**
4304 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4305 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004306CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004307 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004308
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004309/**
4310 * @}
4311 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004312
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004313/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004314 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4315 *
4316 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4317 * be relied upon.
4318 *
4319 * @{
4320 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004321
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004322/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004323CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004324CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4325 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004326 const char **endBuf,
4327 unsigned *startLine,
4328 unsigned *startColumn,
4329 unsigned *endLine,
4330 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004331CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004332CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4333 unsigned stack_size);
4334
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004335/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004336 * @}
4337 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004338
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004339/**
4340 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4341 *
4342 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4343 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4344 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4345 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4346 * routines provide support for code completion.
4347 *
4348 * @{
4349 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004350
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004351/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004352 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4353 *
4354 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4355 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4356 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4357 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4358 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4359 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4360 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4361 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004362 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004363 */
4364typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004365
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004366/**
4367 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4368 */
4369typedef struct {
4370 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004371 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004372 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004373 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004374 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4375 * referring to.
4376 *
4377 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4378 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4379 */
4380 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004381
4382 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004383 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4384 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4385 */
4386 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4387} CXCompletionResult;
4388
4389/**
4390 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4391 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004392 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4393 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004394 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4395 */
4396enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4397 /**
4398 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4399 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4400 *
4401 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004402 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004403 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4404 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4405 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4406 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4407 *
4408 * \code
4409 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4410 * \endcode
4411 *
4412 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4413 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4414 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4415 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4416 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4417 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004418 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004419 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4420 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4421 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4422 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4423 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004424 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004425 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4426 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4427 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4428 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4429 */
4430 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4431 /**
4432 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004433 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004434 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004435 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4436 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004437 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4438 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4439 * chunk.
4440 */
4441 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4442 /**
4443 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4444 *
4445 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4446 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4447 * be selected.
4448 */
4449 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4450 /**
4451 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4452 *
4453 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4454 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4455 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4456 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4457 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4458 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4459 */
4460 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4461 /**
4462 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4463 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004464 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004465 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4466 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4467 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4468 * by code completion.
4469 */
4470 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4471 /**
4472 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4473 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4474 *
4475 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4476 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4477 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4478 *
4479 * \code
4480 * int add(int x, int y);
4481 * \endcode
4482 *
4483 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4484 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4485 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4486 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004487 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004488 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4489 */
4490 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4491 /**
4492 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4493 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4494 */
4495 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4496 /**
4497 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4498 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4499 */
4500 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4501 /**
4502 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4503 */
4504 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4505 /**
4506 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4507 */
4508 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4509 /**
4510 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4511 */
4512 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4513 /**
4514 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4515 */
4516 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4517 /**
4518 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4519 */
4520 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4521 /**
4522 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4523 */
4524 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4525 /**
4526 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4527 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004528 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4529 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004530 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004531 *
4532 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004533 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004534 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4535 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004536 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4537 /**
4538 * \brief A colon (':').
4539 */
4540 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4541 /**
4542 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4543 */
4544 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4545 /**
4546 * \brief An '=' sign.
4547 */
4548 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4549 /**
4550 * Horizontal space (' ').
4551 */
4552 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4553 /**
4554 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4555 * perform indentation.
4556 */
4557 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004558};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004559
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004560/**
4561 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4562 *
4563 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4564 *
4565 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4566 *
4567 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4568 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004569CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004570clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4571 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004572
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004573/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004574 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004575 * completion string.
4576 *
4577 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4578 *
4579 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4580 *
4581 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4582 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004583CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004584clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4585 unsigned chunk_number);
4586
4587/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004588 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004589 * within a completion string.
4590 *
4591 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4592 *
4593 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4594 *
4595 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004596 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004597 */
4598CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4599clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4600 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004601
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004602/**
4603 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4604 */
4605CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4606clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4607
4608/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004609 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4610 *
4611 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4612 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4613 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4614 *
4615 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4616 *
4617 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4618 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4619 */
4620CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4621clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4622
4623/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004624 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4625 * string refers to.
4626 *
4627 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4628 *
4629 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4630 */
4631CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4632clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4633
4634/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004635 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4636 * completion string.
4637 *
4638 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4639 *
4640 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4641 * string.
4642 */
4643CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4644clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4645
4646/**
4647 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4648 *
4649 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4650 *
4651 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4652 * completion string.
4653 *
4654 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4655 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4656 */
4657CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4658clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4659 unsigned annotation_number);
4660
4661/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004662 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4663 *
4664 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4665 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4666 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4667 * or protocol as its context.
4668 *
4669 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4670 * being queried.
4671 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004672 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004673 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004674 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004675 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4676 */
4677CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4678clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4679 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004680
4681/**
4682 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4683 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4684 */
4685CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4686clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4687
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004688/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004689 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4690 * definition cursor.
4691 *
4692 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4693 *
4694 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4695 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4696 */
4697CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4698clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4699
4700/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004701 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4702 *
4703 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004704 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004705 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4706 */
4707typedef struct {
4708 /**
4709 * \brief The code-completion results.
4710 */
4711 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4712
4713 /**
4714 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4715 * \c Results array.
4716 */
4717 unsigned NumResults;
4718} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4719
4720/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004721 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4722 * modify its behavior.
4723 *
4724 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4725 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4726 */
4727enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4728 /**
4729 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4730 * completions returned.
4731 */
4732 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4733
4734 /**
4735 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4736 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4737 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004738 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4739
4740 /**
4741 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4742 * completions returned.
4743 */
4744 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004745};
4746
4747/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004748 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4749 *
4750 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4751 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4752 */
4753enum CXCompletionContext {
4754 /**
4755 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4756 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4757 */
4758 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4759
4760 /**
4761 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4762 */
4763 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4764
4765 /**
4766 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4767 * should be included in the results.
4768 */
4769 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4770 /**
4771 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4772 * be included in the results.
4773 */
4774 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4775 /**
4776 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4777 * should be included in the results.
4778 */
4779 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4780 /**
4781 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4782 * included in the results.
4783 */
4784 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4785
4786 /**
4787 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4788 * operator should be included in the results.
4789 */
4790 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4791 /**
4792 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4793 * operator should be included in the results.
4794 */
4795 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4796 /**
4797 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4798 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4799 */
4800 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4801
4802 /**
4803 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4804 */
4805 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4806 /**
4807 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4808 */
4809 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4810 /**
4811 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4812 */
4813 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4814
4815 /**
4816 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4817 */
4818 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4819 /**
4820 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4821 * included in the results.
4822 */
4823 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4824 /**
4825 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4826 * the results.
4827 */
4828 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4829
4830 /**
4831 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4832 * in the results.
4833 */
4834 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4835 /**
4836 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4837 * the results.
4838 */
4839 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4840 /**
4841 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4842 * the results.
4843 */
4844 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4845 /**
4846 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4847 * in the results.
4848 */
4849 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4850 /**
4851 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4852 * the results.
4853 */
4854 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4855 /**
4856 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4857 * the results.
4858 */
4859 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4860
4861 /**
4862 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4863 * the results.
4864 */
4865 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4866
4867 /**
4868 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4869 */
4870 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4871
4872 /**
4873 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4874 */
4875 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4876};
4877
4878/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004879 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4880 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4881 */
4882CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4883
4884/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004885 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4886 *
4887 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4888 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4889 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4890 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4891 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4892 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4893 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4894 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4895 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4896 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
4897 *
4898 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
4899 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
4900 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
4901 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
4902 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
4903 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
4904 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
4905 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
4906 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
4907 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
4908 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
4909 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
4910 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
4911 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
4912 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
4913 * have a lower latency.
4914 *
4915 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
4916 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
4917 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
4918 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
4919 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
4920 *
4921 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
4922 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
4923 * included in the translation unit.
4924 *
4925 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
4926 *
4927 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
4928 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
4929 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
4930 *
4931 * \param unsaved_files the Tiles that have not yet been saved to disk
4932 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
4933 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
4934 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
4935 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
4936 * this function returns.
4937 *
4938 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
4939 * unsaved_files.
4940 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004941 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
4942 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
4943 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
4944 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
4945 * of code-completion options.
4946 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004947 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
4948 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
4949 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
4950 * completion fails, returns NULL.
4951 */
4952CINDEX_LINKAGE
4953CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4954 const char *complete_filename,
4955 unsigned complete_line,
4956 unsigned complete_column,
4957 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004958 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
4959 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004960
4961/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00004962 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
4963 * order.
4964 *
4965 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
4966 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
4967 */
4968CINDEX_LINKAGE
4969void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
4970 unsigned NumResults);
4971
4972/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004973 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
4974 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004975CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004976void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004977
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00004978/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004979 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
4980 * location where code completion was performed.
4981 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004982CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004983unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
4984
4985/**
4986 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
4987 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004988 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004989 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
4990 *
4991 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
4992 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
4993 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004994CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004995CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4996 unsigned Index);
4997
4998/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00004999 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005000 * the given code completion.
5001 *
5002 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5003 *
5004 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5005 * along with the given code completion results.
5006 */
5007CINDEX_LINKAGE
5008unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5009 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005010
5011/**
5012 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5013 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5014 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5015 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5016 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5017 *
5018 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5019 *
5020 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5021 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5022 * information, this value will be true.
5023 *
5024 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5025 * container
5026 */
5027CINDEX_LINKAGE
5028enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5029 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5030 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5031
5032/**
5033 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5034 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5035 * function will return the empty string.
5036 *
5037 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5038 *
5039 * \returns the USR for the container
5040 */
5041CINDEX_LINKAGE
5042CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
NAKAMURA Takumiaa13f942015-12-09 07:52:46 +00005043
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005044/**
5045 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5046 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5047 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5048 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5049 *
5050 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5051 *
5052 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5053 * for an Objective-C message send.
5054 */
5055CINDEX_LINKAGE
5056CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5057
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005058/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005059 * @}
5060 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005061
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005062/**
5063 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5064 *
5065 * @{
5066 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005067
5068/**
5069 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5070 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5071 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005072CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005073
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005074/**
5075 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5076 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005077 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5078 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005079 */
5080CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5081
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005082 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005083 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005084 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5085 *
5086 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005087 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005088 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5089 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5090 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5091 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5092 */
5093typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5094 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5095 unsigned include_len,
5096 CXClientData client_data);
5097
5098/**
5099 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5100 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5101 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5102 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5103 */
5104CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5105 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5106 CXClientData client_data);
5107
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005108typedef enum {
5109 CXEval_Int = 1 ,
5110 CXEval_Float = 2,
5111 CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
5112 CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
5113 CXEval_CFStr = 5,
5114 CXEval_Other = 6,
5115
5116 CXEval_UnExposed = 0
5117
5118} CXEvalResultKind ;
5119
5120/**
5121 * \brief Evaluation result of a cursor
5122 */
5123typedef void * CXEvalResult;
5124
5125/**
5126 * \brief If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
5127 * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
5128 * into its corresponding type.
5129 */
5130CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
5131
5132/**
5133 * \brief Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
5134 */
5135CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
5136
5137/**
5138 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
5139 * kind is Int.
5140 */
5141int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
5142
5143/**
5144 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as double if the
5145 * kind is double.
5146 */
5147double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
5148
5149/**
5150 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
5151 * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
5152 * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
5153 * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
5154 */
5155const char* clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
5156
5157/**
5158 * \brief Disposes the created Eval memory.
5159 */
5160void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005161/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005162 * @}
5163 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005164
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005165/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5166 *
5167 * @{
5168 */
5169
5170/**
5171 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5172 */
5173typedef void *CXRemapping;
5174
5175/**
5176 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5177 *
5178 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5179 *
5180 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5181 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5182 */
5183CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5184
5185/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005186 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5187 *
5188 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5189 *
5190 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5191 *
5192 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5193 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5194 */
5195CINDEX_LINKAGE
5196CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5197 unsigned numFiles);
5198
5199/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005200 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5201 */
5202CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5203
5204/**
5205 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5206 *
5207 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5208 *
5209 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5210 * is associated with.
5211 */
5212CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5213 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5214
5215/**
5216 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5217 */
5218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5219
5220/**
5221 * @}
5222 */
5223
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005224/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5225 *
5226 * @{
5227 */
5228
5229enum CXVisitorResult {
5230 CXVisit_Break,
5231 CXVisit_Continue
5232};
5233
5234typedef struct {
5235 void *context;
5236 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5237} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5238
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005239typedef enum {
5240 /**
5241 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5242 */
5243 CXResult_Success = 0,
5244 /**
5245 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5246 */
5247 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5248 /**
5249 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5250 * CXVisit_Break)
5251 */
5252 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5253
5254} CXResult;
5255
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005256/**
5257 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5258 *
5259 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5260 *
5261 * \param file to search for references.
5262 *
5263 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5264 * each reference found.
5265 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5266 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005267 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005268 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005269 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005270CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5271 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005272
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005273/**
5274 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5275 *
5276 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5277 *
5278 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5279 *
5280 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5281 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005282 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005283 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005284 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005285CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5286 CXFile file,
5287 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005288
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005289#ifdef __has_feature
5290# if __has_feature(blocks)
5291
5292typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5293 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5294
5295CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005296CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5297 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005298
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005299CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005300CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5301 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005302
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005303# endif
5304#endif
5305
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005306/**
5307 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5308 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005309typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005310
5311/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005312 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5313 */
5314typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5315
5316/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005317 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5318 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005319 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005320typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005321
5322/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005323 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5324 * or module).
5325 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005326typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005327
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005328/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005329 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005330 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005331typedef struct {
5332 void *ptr_data[2];
5333 unsigned int_data;
5334} CXIdxLoc;
5335
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005336/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005337 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005338 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005339typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005340 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005341 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005342 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005343 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005344 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005345 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005346 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005347 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005348 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005349 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005350 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005351 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005352 int isImport;
5353 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005354 /**
5355 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5356 * import.
5357 */
5358 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005359} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5360
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005361/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005362 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005363 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005364typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005365 /**
5366 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5367 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005368 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005369 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005370 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5371 */
5372 CXModule module;
5373 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005374 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005375 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005376 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005377 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005378 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005379 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005380 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005381 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005382
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005383} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5384
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005385typedef enum {
5386 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5387 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5388 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5389 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5390 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5391 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5392
5393 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5394 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5395 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5396
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005397 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5398 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5399 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5400 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005401
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005402 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5403 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5404 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005405
5406 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5407 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5408 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5409 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5410 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5411 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005412 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5413 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5414 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5415 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5416 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5417
5418} CXIdxEntityKind;
5419
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005420typedef enum {
5421 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5422 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5423 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5424 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5425} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5426
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005427/**
5428 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5429 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5430 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5431 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5432 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5433 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5434 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5435 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5436 */
5437typedef enum {
5438 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5439 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5440 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5441 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5442} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5443
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005444typedef enum {
5445 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5446 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5447 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5448 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5449} CXIdxAttrKind;
5450
5451typedef struct {
5452 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5453 CXCursor cursor;
5454 CXIdxLoc loc;
5455} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5456
5457typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005458 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5459 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5460 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5461 const char *name;
5462 const char *USR;
5463 CXCursor cursor;
5464 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5465 unsigned numAttributes;
5466} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5467
5468typedef struct {
5469 CXCursor cursor;
5470} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5471
5472typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005473 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5474 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5475 CXCursor classCursor;
5476 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5477} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5478
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005479typedef enum {
5480 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5481} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5482
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005483typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005484 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005485 CXCursor cursor;
5486 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005487 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5488 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005489 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005490 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5491 */
5492 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005493 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005494 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005495 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005496 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005497 /**
5498 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005499 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005500 */
5501 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005502 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5503 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005504
5505 unsigned flags;
5506
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005507} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005508
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005509typedef enum {
5510 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5511 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5512 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5513} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005514
5515typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005516 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005517 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5518} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005519
5520typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005521 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5522 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005523 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005524} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005525
5526typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005527 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5528 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005529 CXIdxLoc loc;
5530} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5531
5532typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005533 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005534 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005535} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005536
5537typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005538 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5539 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5540 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5541} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005542
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005543typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005544 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5545 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5546 CXCursor classCursor;
5547 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5548 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5549} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5550
5551typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005552 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005553 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5554 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5555} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5556
5557typedef struct {
5558 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005559 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5560 unsigned numBases;
5561} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5562
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005563/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005564 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005565 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005566typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005567 /**
5568 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5569 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005570 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005571 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005572 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5573 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005574 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005575 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005576} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5577
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005578/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005579 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005580 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005581typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005582 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005583 /**
5584 * \brief Reference cursor.
5585 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005586 CXCursor cursor;
5587 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005588 /**
5589 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5590 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005591 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005592 /**
5593 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5594 *
5595 * \code
5596 * Foo *var;
5597 * \endcode
5598 *
5599 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005600 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5601 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005602 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005603 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005604 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005605 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005606 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005607 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005608} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5609
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005610/**
5611 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5612 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5613 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005614typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005615 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005616 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5617 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5618 */
5619 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5620
5621 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005622 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005623 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005624 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005625 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005626
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005627 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005628 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005629
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005630 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005631 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005632 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005633 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005634 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005635
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005636 /**
5637 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5638 *
5639 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5640 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005641 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5642 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005643 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005644 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005645 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005646
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005647 /**
5648 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5649 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005650 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005651 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005652
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005653 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005654 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005655
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005656 /**
5657 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5658 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005659 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005660 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005661
5662} IndexerCallbacks;
5663
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005664CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005665CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5666clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005667
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005668CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5669clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5670
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005671CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005672const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5673clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5674
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005675CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5676clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005677
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005678CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5679clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5680
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005681CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5682clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5683
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005684CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5685clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5686
5687/**
5688 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5689 * container.
5690 */
5691CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5692clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5693
5694/**
5695 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5696 * container.
5697 */
5698CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5699clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5700
5701/**
5702 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5703 */
5704CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5705clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5706
5707/**
5708 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5709 */
5710CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5711clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5712
5713/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005714 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5715 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005716 */
5717typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5718
5719/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005720 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5721 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005722 *
5723 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5724 */
5725CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5726
5727/**
5728 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5729 *
5730 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5731 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5732 */
5733CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5734
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005735typedef enum {
5736 /**
5737 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5738 */
5739 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5740
5741 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005742 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5743 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5744 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005745 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005746 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5747
5748 /**
5749 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5750 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5751 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005752 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5753
5754 /**
5755 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5756 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5757 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005758 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5759
5760 /**
5761 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5762 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005763 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5764
5765 /**
5766 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005767 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005768 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5769 */
5770 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5771
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005772} CXIndexOptFlags;
5773
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005774/**
5775 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005776 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005777 *
5778 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5779 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5780 *
5781 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5782 * implements.
5783 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005784 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005785 * passed in index_callbacks.
5786 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005787 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5788 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005789 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005790 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5791 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005792 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005793 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005794 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005795 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005796 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005797 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005798 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005799CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005800 CXClientData client_data,
5801 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5802 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5803 unsigned index_options,
5804 const char *source_filename,
5805 const char * const *command_line_args,
5806 int num_command_line_args,
5807 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5808 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5809 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5810 unsigned TU_options);
5811
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005812/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005813 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5814 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5815 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5816 */
5817CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5818 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5819 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5820 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5821 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5822 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5823
5824/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005825 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005826 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005827 *
5828 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5829 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5830 *
5831 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5832 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5833 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5834 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005835 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005836 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005837 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005838 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5839 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005840CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005841 CXClientData client_data,
5842 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5843 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005844 unsigned index_options,
5845 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005846
5847/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005848 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5849 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5850 *
5851 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5852 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5853 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5854 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005855CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005856 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005857 CXFile *file,
5858 unsigned *line,
5859 unsigned *column,
5860 unsigned *offset);
5861
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005862/**
5863 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5864 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005865CINDEX_LINKAGE
5866CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5867
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005868/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005869 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5870 *
5871 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5872 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5873 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5874 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5875 *
5876 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5877 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5878 */
5879typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5880 CXClientData client_data);
5881
5882/**
5883 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5884 *
5885 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5886 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5887 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5888 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5889 *
5890 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5891 *
5892 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5893 * field of \p T.
5894 *
5895 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5896 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
5897 *
5898 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
5899 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5900 */
5901CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
5902 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
5903 CXClientData client_data);
5904
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005905/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005906 * @}
5907 */
5908
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005909/**
5910 * @}
5911 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005912
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005913#ifdef __cplusplus
5914}
5915#endif
5916#endif